Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. 1 . Finally.Introduction In this tutorial.

2 .

You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. electrical. and plumbing fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. electrical panels. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Add basic MEP elements. such as mechanical equipment. fixtures. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. and plumbing engineering workflows. Germany. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. 3 . What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. such as duct. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and piping.

they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Create schedules. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. annotations. On the Contents tab. and sheets to document the project. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. In this exercise. When you install the training files as instructed. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. However. your Training folder may be in a different location. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. templates. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. So. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. For example. Metric: files for users working with metric units. such as templates and families. Metric file names have an _m suffix. however. is located and accessed in the training files location. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. For example. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. views. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. when you add ductwork. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. and tags. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. you learn where the training files are located. After completing each exercise. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. NOTE Depending on your installation. When you open a training file. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. to provide a richer and more finished design. Create detail views. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials .■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. You do not design entire systems. you can choose to save your work. as well as how to open and save them. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. You may close the file with or without saving changes. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. scroll down. and click the Training Files icon.rvt and make changes. a list of file types displays. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. double-click Imperial or Metric. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. verify that Project Files (*. the Open dialog displays. and click Save. 4 Click the training file name. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. For example. click ➤ Save As. if you open settings. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. select the folder in which to save the new file. you are prompted to save the changes.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. 3 In the right pane. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For File name. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. Accessing Training Files | 5 . enter the new file name. For Files of type. 8 If you have made changes. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. and click Open.rvt) is selected. and you can open any supported file type.

6 .

If the length of the elevation is changed. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and schedules required for a building project. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. hence. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. the door retains this relationship to the partition. sections. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. drawing sheets.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. and plans. the operation of the software is parametric. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the hierarchy of elements. quantities. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. If you move the partition. the parameter is one of association or connection. schedules. every drawing sheet. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. 2D and 3D view. drawings. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. In the Revit MEP model. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. In this case. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the floor or roof remains connected. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. scope. and phases when you need it. You learn the terminology. In this case. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. ■ ■ 7 .

■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. boilers. tags. ducts. and electrical panels. sinks. When you change something. Examples include detail lines. sprinklers. and 2D detail components. tags. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. walls and ceilings are hosts. sinks. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. sprinklers. For example. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. They help to describe or document the design. ducts. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. boilers. dimensions. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. dimensions. For example. For example. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Datum elements help to define project context. For example. For example. and electrical panels. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. grids. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. They display in relevant views of the design. filled regions. and reference planes are datum elements. levels.

Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. This information includes components used to design the model. families. In other cases. or bottom of foundation. from geometry to construction data. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . and ceilings. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. for example. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. section views. and so forth). By using a single project file. you can explicitly control them. first floor. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. and drawings of the design.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. programming is not required. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. schedules. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. floors. Often. If you can draw. you do nothing to establish these relationships. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. To place levels. In Revit MEP. and types. However. elevation views. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. top of wall. such as roofs. Most often. Project: In Revit MEP. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. The project file contains all information for the building design. views of the project. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. you must be in a section or elevation view. North . For example. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common.

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. and wires. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Then experiment with them. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. For example. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. For example. System families can be transferred between projects. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. With a few clicks. A type can also be a style. identical use. pipes. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. A type can be a specific size of a family. showing. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. For example. Type: Each family can have several types. You can also display several project views at one time. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. and similar graphical representation. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. or layer the views to see only the one on top. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. each in-place family contains only a single type. However. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. such as a A0 title block. Unlike system and standard component families. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. hiding. System families include ducts. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties).

Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To return the panel to the ribbon. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop.

Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. and CAD files. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. project and system parameters.. data and systems. tools used for editing existing elements. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. When working on the Modify tab. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and for switching views. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. select the tool first. and settings.. then select what you want to modify. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. architect-specific tools. tools used for running analysis on the current design.

Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. when adding duct. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. For example.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. To keep a panel expanded. displays frequently used tools. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. closes the application menu (double-click). By default. provides requested information. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. provides access to common tools.

(Save As) export the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu... (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. select a file to open. select a template and create a new drawing.. such as Export and Publish. (Open) save the current drawing. click. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. (Export) On the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

but is not enabled by default.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. click. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. annotation.. family. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. Camera. to. (Licensing) close the file.On the application menu. annotation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . (Print) access product and license information. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. To enable or disable a tool item. and Walkthrough. (Publish) print the current drawing. provides views including Default 3D. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. saves a current project. family. or template file. or template file.. publish the current project. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar..

repeat the command. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Starting with the most recent command. Clear the Status Bar check mark. displaying the same information. When you are using a command. When you are highlighting an element or component. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. or the Family Editor. In addition. To show the Status Bar again. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. This displays the command history in a list.To undo or redo a series of operations. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. check the Status Bar. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. when you switch to another editing mode. Modify. To hide the Status Bar. However. Group. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Clipboard. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. workshared components. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame.

including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area.To cancel or exit the current command. On the Quick Access toolbar. When you place an element in a drawing. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. for example. select one or more elements of the same category. click (Modify). do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Place a Wall. To change existing elements to a different type. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element.

1 Click ➤ Open. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. After you are familiar with these tasks. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.rvt. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. Zoom the view In the tutorials. In the following steps. For example. There are several ways to access zoom options. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.

5 Click Zoom To Fit. If you do not have a wheel mouse. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click . on the Navigation bar. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. Modifying the View | 19 . NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. the view zooms in on the selected area. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 9 To display SteeringWheels. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 6 Click in the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. When you release the mouse button. To modify or add snap increments. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. use a zoom menu command to zoom out.

To define settings for SteeringWheels.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and click tin the Options dialog. As you move the mouse. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click the SteeringWheels tab. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 14 To exit the wheel. Click and drag to orbit the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . press ESC. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. and then using the Zoom tool again. For more information about SteeringWheels. ➤ Options. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. moving the wheel to the desired location. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.

Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . as shown. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. display along the ends. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. bottoms. referred to as shape handles. Small blue dots. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. and select the duct. Similar controls. After you are familiar with these tasks. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Level 2 .HVAC Plan . 3 Click and drag the bottom control. 2 Enter ZR. These are the drag controls. called drag controls.

8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. click the Undo command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. on the Standard toolbar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . All changes you make to a project are tracked. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. Move. select the first item in the list.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 6 On the Undo menu. In this example. or press CTRL+Z.

such as Move and Copy. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .Some commands. and drag it to the left as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and click again to specify the ending position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. click to specify the starting position. After selecting the element to move. as shown. In this case. for example. 10 Move the cursor to the right. The duct is moved to the new position. 11 With the duct already selected. you want to move the duct. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct.

14 Enter VG. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 13 To end a command.Return. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.End a command Some commands. Press ESC twice. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. For example. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.Supply. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. such as the Modify Ducts command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Select Mechanical . 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. click Browse. and geometry from the starting template. the default building levels and standard views. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default.rte template. New projects inherit all the families. and modify system settings. click Training files. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. settings. and open North. 6 Click OK. link files. In that case. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. select Project.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. you learn how to start a project from a template. such as ducts and pipes. 7 In the Project Browser. such as coordination review and interference checking. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can either select a template from the template library. 5 In the New Project dialog. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Finally. and click Open. such as the default project units and settings. and loadable families. You can choose from several templates. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. under Create new. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 27 . use copy/monitor. system families. create and manage views. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. and open Metric ➤ Templates. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. under Template file.

17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog.rte template and click Open. ■ For Building Construction. For Location. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. click Browse. review the construction materials listed. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. If you want to use a template other than the default. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. click (Browse). (Browse). you can establish settings that are common to most projects. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. click Edit. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. under Energy Analysis. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. ■ ■ Under Create new. select Project template. select Manchester. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. for Energy Data. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . For example. navigate to Metric Templates. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Click OK twice. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. select School or University. select Level 1. In the Choose Template dialog. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. When you select the material. NH. you can select it now. create another new project using the Construction template.8 In the drawing area. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. Click Cancel. Click OK. 10 Using the same method. for City.

wiring. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. under Duct Settings. for 90. After standard settings have been established for an organization. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. select Views. select Identity Data.00 mm. and fire protection systems.rfa and click Open. 260.00 mm. click Sizes. and demand factors for electrical systems. 110.00 mm. 33 Click OK.000 mm. Click OK twice. 290. 24 In the right pane. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 27 Click OK. plumbing. and 140. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 25 In the left pane. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. under Pipe Settings. click Wiring. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 110. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. click Rectangular. click Round. Holding CTRL. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 140. for 90. 22 In the right pane. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 26 In the right pane.00 mm.00 mm.00 mm. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.00 mm. 23 In the left pane. for 20. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.00 mm. For Categories. piping. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. power distribution systems. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. under Duct Settings.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical.00 mm. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . and 310.

you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. For Then by. select Project. and groups that are contained in a project. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. 5 Click OK. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. under Template file. In addition. You need to create the MEP model for the project. click Training. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. To enable this coordination. Click Open. select Associated Level. under Create new. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select Auto . you link the architectural model with the MEP model. families. Linking Projects In this exercise. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project.rvt. Notice that the file is saved as a template. select View Name. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. select Family and Type. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization.Origin to Origin. From the Positioning list. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. sheets. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. For Sort by. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Sub-Discipline. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Select Ascending Click OK twice. click Browse. 38 Close the file. 4 In the New Project dialog.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. under Constraints. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Linking Projects | 31 .The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 8 If necessary. 12 Click OK. select Room Bounding.Mech. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model.Floor. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. click the level line for 03. 17 On the Options Bar. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 On the left side of the view. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. warnings notify you of any violations. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. for the link file. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. click By Host View. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. highlight the linked model. 27 In the drawing area. a warning message displays. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. 29 In the drawing area. 34 On the Basics tab. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. Linking Projects | 33 . select Custom. and click to select the linked model. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. appears above the copied elements. click Custom. indicating that an element has changed. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. After copying. and that the copied elements are monitored. indicating that a relationship is established. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. and the level 4. If you modify a monitored element. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. level 3. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized.

under View Properties. Under Visibility. Roads. 5 On the Basics tab. 36 Click OK. for the link file. Click OK. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. click Custom. click Custom. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . enter Mechanical View and click OK. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. 2 In the New View Template dialog. deselect Parking.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. and Topography. for Name. 3 In the View templates dialog. 7 Click OK twice. Under Visibility. Select Show categories from all disciplines. click Edit. Click OK. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. select Custom. deselect Levels. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Site. Planting.

selection default options. journal cleanup options. select Invert background color. click Training Files. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modifying System Settings | 35 . notification preferences. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 3 Under Colors. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. and your username when using worksharing. 7 Click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click Browse. 9 In the Options dialog. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. Notice that the drawing area is black. they are not saved to project files or template files. select Mechanical and click OK. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.rte. 8 Click ➤ Options. 5 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. These settings control the graphics. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. click the Graphics tab. under Template file. 2 In the Options dialog. click the Graphics tab. under View Templates. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. and click OK.

the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. For Tooltip assistance. 12 Click the General tab. and click OK. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. family template files. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 14 Click OK. you specify default file locations. select yellow. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.10 Under Colors. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. When an error occurs. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. and family libraries. However. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. select One hour. 13 Under Notifications. 2 In the Options dialog. 17 Press ESC to end the command. the elements causing the error display using this color. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. click the File Locations tab. select None. 11 In the Color dialog. including your default project template. 18 Select the wall. 19 Press ESC to end the command. click the value for Selection color. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Load. 4 Click Cancel. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. such as in a large. Save.3 Under Default template file. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. In the following illustration. click Browse. or loading a Revit MEP file. and you can create new libraries. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. saving. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. under Default path for family template files. TIP To view a template. and click Open. 5 Under Default path for user files. However. Specifying File Locations | 37 . MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. When you are opening. 7 In the Options dialog. ➤ New ➤ Project. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 10 In the Places dialog. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 8 Click Cancel. click Browse. click Places. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. Click and click Browse to select a template. select the folder to save your files to by default. centralized. you can start a new project with that template. and Import dialogs. note the list of library names. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. click Browse. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. You can modify the existing library names and path.

templates. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. click (Add Value). Load. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. Save. and click Open. and Import dialogs. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click OK twice. and change the name to My Library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 15 Under Library Name. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog.11 In the Places dialog. click My Library. click the My Library icon. and click (Browse). ➤ Open. and select it as the library path. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. or families.

26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 22 Select My Library. 23 Click 24 Click OK. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 20 Click ➤ Options. (Remove Value) to delete the library. and decal image files. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 14 Click in the drawing area. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. such as bump maps. select Ignore words in uppercase. 9 In the text editor. click Edit. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. specify the new location here. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 21 On the File Locations tab. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 3 Under Settings. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. If you work in a large office. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. view the current path. click Edit. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. click OK.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 27 Click OK. enter sheetmtl-Cu. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click the Spelling tab. If you want to relocate this path. This path is determined during installation. 5 In the text editor. custom color files. 19 Click Cancel. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 2 In the Options dialog. 11 In the Options dialog. click Places. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

18 Click ➤ Options. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click Training Files. click Edit. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Close. click Browse. 22 In the text editor. under Dimension Snaps. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file.rte. 23 In the text editor. 25 Close the file without saving it. delete sheetmtl-CU. 19 In the Options dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 4 In the New Project dialog. In this exercise. click the Spelling tab. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. under Template file. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 20 Under Settings. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you modify snap increments. You can turn snap settings on and off. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 24 In the Options dialog. you modify snap settings. work with snapping turned off. and enter 500 . 2 In the New Project dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Restore Defaults.

you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. zoom out until it does so. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. TIP To zoom while sketching. 10 On the Options Bar. and move the cursor to the right. use the wheel button on your mouse. enter SM. This is the increment that you added previously. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . such as ZO to zoom out. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. While sketching.7 Under Object Snaps. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. For example. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. If you do not have a wheel button. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 8 In the Snaps dialog. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. click OK. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If it does not. deselect Chain. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall.

the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 26 Close the file. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and delete the value 500 . 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Do not set the wall end point. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 19 Enter SM.. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and the wall edges. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 22 Move the cursor downward. and move the cursor to the right. click in the Length dimension snap increments box.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the midpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and specify the wall endpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. If you move the cursor along the wall. it will snap to the endpoints. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 25 Click OK. with or without saving it. Notice that snapping is once again active.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

you first configure the linked architectural model. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. After finishing each exercise. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After applying a color scheme to the zones. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you can choose to save your work. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. If the tutorial training files are not present. and then you create a plenum level. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. water source heat pump (WSHP). each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In this exercise. you first plan the system. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. This system consists of a cooling tower. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will understand the process. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. However. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In this lesson. As you create the mechanical system. 45 . you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. methodology. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. By following the recommended workflow. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. At the end of the tutorial. duct system and a hydronic piping system. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you design a mechanical system for an office building. go to http://www.

3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.MEP. not in the MEP training file. Next. click Training Files. NOTE When working with a linked file. roof. ceilings. click to select it. under Constraints. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt.Space Plan is highlighted. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. indicating that it’s the active view. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. and click OK. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In this section. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you add a level for plenums. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . These components are defined in the architectural training file. and after the linked model highlights. and double-click West . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Room Bounding.

16 Press Esc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and click Properties. and click OK. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. Click Plan View Types. For Offset. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. The new level is placed. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and enter Level 2 Plenum. and in the Plan View Types dialog. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Verify that Make Plan View is selected. enter 2600mm. 9 On the Draw panel. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4).7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click Level 2 Plenum. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.

The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. select MEP . In this exercise. In the next exercise. and click Apply Default View Template. select Plenum Plan. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . select Design. Under Extents. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. However. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and for Offset. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. ■ Click OK twice. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. In this exercise.Plenum. 20 In the Project Browser. NOTE After finishing each exercise. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. and then place spaces in various types of areas. for Level. For View Classification.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. click Edit. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Top. for View Scale. enter 0. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. for Default View Template. For Cut plane. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. enter an Offset of 300mm. select Level Above (Level 3). This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Under Identity Data. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for View Range. you can choose to save your work. Under View Depth. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. For Sub-Discipline. you place spaces in areas of the building model. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides.

6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. enter 0.Space Plan is highlighted.rvt. For Offset. For (Tag Location).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select New. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and ceilings). walls. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. Placing Spaces | 49 . and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. select Horizontal. For Space. For Upper Limit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 2 Plenum. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. click Training Files.

8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter 219. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Click OK. ensuring coordination between the files. For Name. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 14 In the drawing area.7 Click to place the space. for Number.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 9 Select the space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter Library.

Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. For Offset. Placing Spaces | 51 . 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. enter 0. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Using the method learned previously. For Upper Limit. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. select Level 3. and then click Modify. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.

under Energy Analysis. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. and then split the space using a space separation line. you place a space in a large corridor area.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 23 Click OK. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. and for Offset.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and then press Esc. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. enter 0. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. for Upper Limit. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . select Level 3. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 5 On the Options Bar.

10 Click in the number column. In the schedule. which was numbered 219Q. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and scroll to the newly placed space. and select Corridor.7 In the Project Browser. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and change the space number to 216A. click in the name column. 9 In the schedule. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule.

Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. as shown. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 15 Press Esc twice. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 11 Close the schedule view. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.

56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. you place a space in a chase.16 Using the method learned previously. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). place a space in the lower area of the split space. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Space Plan is highlighted.rvt. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. click Training Files. If necessary. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

select Roof Level. 6 Enter VG. For Offset. On the Options Bar. and then click OK. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. expand Spaces. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. enter 0.4 Press Esc. In the plan view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. click in the chase area to place the space. for Upper Limit. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Interior and Reference. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 10 In the plan view. 12 Click in the section view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. right-click. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. and click Element Properties. select the space. for Upper Limit.

15 Press Esc. and maximize the view. All spaces in the view are tagged. enter 225PC. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof.Space Plan. under Loaded Tags. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . floors. enter Chase. and click OK. enter 1200. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. For Number. Bounding elements (such as walls. ceilings. for Name. 17 Type ZF. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. Under Identity Data. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.■ For Limit Offset.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. click Reference. it is automatically added to the Default zone. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building.20 Close the file with or without saving it. under Spaces. After a space is placed in an area. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. click View ➤ Zones. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. 3 Right-click in the System Browser.rvt. To display space reference lines. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. which removes the space from the Default zone. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. In this exercise. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. In the next exercises. you view and verify zones in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted.

double-click 121 Cafeteria. under Spaces. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. As you do this. click Reference. The graphic in the System Browser updates.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. To display space reference lines. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and verify the zones in the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. select Occupiable. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. ) or 5 In the System Browser. The Zone tool is active.rvt. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. under Energy Analysis. and click OK. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Zoning is highlighted. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . the Edit Zone tab displays. Next. you assign spaces to zones in the building. indicating that it’s the active view. and a new zone is created. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you assign spaces to a zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). You work with a single zone until you click Finish. type VG. and click Finish Editing Zone. select HVAC Zones.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Instruction. Click OK. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and Electrical 220 spaces. you need to activate the zone visibility. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. To view the zone in the drawing area. and modify the zone properties. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Instruction 221. 4 In the drawing area. you can add or remove a space from the zone. select Computer Lab 222. 5 With the drawing area active. Expand HVAC Zones. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). In the System Browser. Using the Edit Zone tab. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab.

click Finish Editing Zone. To display space reference lines.Zoning view to activate it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. In this exercise.West . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.Zoning is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and click OK. under Spaces. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. expand 2 . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.West . click Reference. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. enter 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m.Area B. You activated zone visibility in the views. click Training Files. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 5 Click in the Level 1 .Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. and verify the zone in the System Browser. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.TIP After you finish editing the zone. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 11 Close the System Browser. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.Zoning. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Identity Data. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . indicating that it’s the active view. 9 In the System Browser. for Name.

13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning view.Zoning floor plan. zoom out. Select Attached End. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 In the Level 1 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. click in the Level 2 . 9 With the Add Space tool active. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Verify that the distance is 12mm.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view. 15 Press Esc. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.

The new zone name displays in the System Browser.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. double-click Level 1 . space. on the ViewCube. In this exercise. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. enter Lounge . NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. Front. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.East. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. and zone information. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.rvt. click the corner where the Top. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. double-click the zone tag. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. for Name Value. and select 109 Lounge.Zoning view. you verify the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. and click OK. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C.Zoning to make it the active view. verify that Wireframe is selected.

Using the Highlight tool.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. click (Isolate). With 109 Lounge selected. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Next. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you isolate the space. ■ ■ On the Details tab. select 1_South_Area C. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. ■ Click (Highlight). ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool.

and click OK. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). Below the list of spaces and zones. click . Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. cooling air temperature. scroll down in the left pane. select 109 Lounge.11 °C : 32. This indicates the heating set point. and then click OK. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. For Heating Information. the zone information displays for the selected zone. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. and then click OK. click (Shading). click . These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. heating air temperature. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. verify that 21.22 °C : N/A is specified. click . and dehumidification set point. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. verify that <Building> is selected. and in the People dialog. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. For People. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. outdoor air per area. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. Next. the space information displays for the selected space.22 °C : N/A is specified. ■ ■ ■ Next. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. This indicates the outdoor air per person. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. For Electrical Loads.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. select Lounge/Recreation. For Cooling Information. and humidification set point. verify that <Building> is selected. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. Below the list of spaces and zones.33 °C : 12. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. verify that 23. For Construction Type. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. This indicates the cooling set point. and air changes per hour. Next.

highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. and other room-bounding components. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. floors. roofs. 15 In the Project Browser. enter 0. For Offset. open MEP . The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. click Cancel. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Level 3. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 12 Using the methods learned previously.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space.

notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you verified building. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Under Energy Analysis. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and verify that the space has replaced the void. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. for Number. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. select Plenum. For Name. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). and select space Plenum 212P. Because this is an unoccupied space. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. and zone information. enter 212P. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Under Energy Analysis. Click OK. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. select Plenum. In this exercise. space.

Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. for Energy Data. under Energy Analysis. For Project Phase. For Ground Plane. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. is selected. and click OK. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. double-click Level 2 . verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). select School or University. verify that <Building> is specified. For Sliver Space Tolerance. For Location. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog.rvt. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. verify that 300 is specified. verify that New Construction is selected. For Postal Code.Space Plan. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. In order to select a space. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. this option adjusts the times automatically. verify that Manchester. On the Weather tab. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NH. For Building Construction. enter 03101. you need to select this option. For Export Complexity. and click OK. click Training Files. select space Library 219. verify that Level 1 is selected. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. right-click. 8 In the drawing area. for City. for Building Service. Click OK twice. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. click Edit. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . under Volume Computations. and click Element Properties. If. click in the Value field. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. On the Place tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Select Area per person. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You have verified the building information. Click OK twice. and enter 15 sq. Select the space associated with the warning. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. both. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. For Space Type. Click OK. select Specified. Under Power. for Values. select Library . enter 45 W. is specified. For Building Construction. select Actual. for Values. enter 60 W. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Building Service. verify that Manchester. it should be corrected before you calculate loads.Audio Visual. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. select Specified. and then click . Next. verify that <Building> is specified. select Actual. and click to learn the cause for the warning. click in the Value column. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. click Edit. and click OK. a cooling load. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Under Heat Gain (per Person). select Heated and cooled. For Condition Type. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. For Sensible. m. For Latent. or neither. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that School or University is selected. click Edit. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. For People. for Values. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. For Location. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. for Values. verify that Occupiable is selected. NH. 12 Click the Details tab.

click Calculate. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 19 In the drawing area. and zone information for the building model. and click OK. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. space. click Information). 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. select 219 Library. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. under Energy Analysis. or make any changes to the model. There should be no warnings displayed. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 16 After you review the loads report. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 17 In the loads report. and under Heating Information. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You should correct the space error in the building model. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. and can be modified here. and a loads report displays. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis.Space Plan. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.11°C. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. or zone information. 21 Click OK. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. select 219 Library. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. In this exercise. weather. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 15 Review the loads report for project. space. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.

4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. 5 Zoom in to the legend. 3 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Click OK. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. click to the right of the building to place the legend. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. in relatively small increments. click Training Files.rvt. For Color Scheme. select HVAC Zones. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.

under Schemes. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. and click OK. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values.Expanded Ranges. select the color scheme legend. The new scheme displays in the view. select Cooling Load .

rvt. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. In the next exercise.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. In this exercise. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. 11 Using the method learned previously. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model.

Space Fill is the active view. For Formula. In the Calculated Value dialog. enter . For Name. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. more category options are available. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select New Construction. and then click . In the Fields dialog. select Calculated Supply Airflow. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. for Select available fields from. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. select Spaces. Under Available fields.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. Click OK. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select HVAC. enter Airflow Delta. For Type. For Phase. Click OK. ■ Click Calculated Value. select Air Flow. for Formula. For Discipline. In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Space Airflow Schedule. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click OK. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Select Schedule building components. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. Select Formula. click (Browse). select Spaces. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.

select Number. and then click Conditional Format. In the Color dialog. and Blank line. Select Ascending. right-click to access schedule properties. ■ The schedule displays. For Then by. select Level. Click OK twice.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Value. and click OK. select Level. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. select Airflow Delta. Header. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. select red. For Fields. verify that Show is highlighted. a view opens that contains the selected space. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . Under Conditions to Use. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. For Background Color. and then select Hidden field. click the color swatch. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. select Not Between. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s.

This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. In this exercise. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next lesson.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In later exercises.

After completing the air systems lesson.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you will create supply air systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. Then. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. In this lesson. After system creation. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. and work with the airflow schedule. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. 79 . you modify air terminal parameters. As you place the air terminals.

and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and scroll to space 223. the space crossing lines display. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When you highlight a space using the cursor. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the ceiling view. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. click Training Files. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.

Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 17 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. as shown. select the diffuser. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and select M_Supply Diffuser . 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. If the host element is modified or moved. and then press Esc to end the command. for Flow.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 13 On the Options Bar. click Place on Face. type 3600. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. and press Enter. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the hosted elements are updated as well.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Constrain is cleared. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 9 On the Placement panel. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. enter 215 L/s. Also. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. Next. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. click Place on Face. 24 In the Open dialog. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select one of the diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. 22 In the drawing area. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. click Yes. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 28 On the Placement tab.rfa. 29 Place 2 diffusers.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 In the drawing area. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . and click Open. As you place the return diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and then press Esc.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. as shown. clear Leader.

under Other. 31 In the alert dialog. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select one of the return diffusers. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. select Strong Reference.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. click Yes. and click OK. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 32 In the Project Browser. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . Level. for Reference. and click to select the lines. as shown.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select the vertical grid line as shown. 40 In the drawing area. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. align the other return diffuser. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 43 Using the same method.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. and then press Esc twice. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. as shown.

clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. right-click. select both return diffusers. clear LeftArrow. and click Element Properties. enter 310 L/s. for Flow. 47 Using the same method. As you place the air terminals. and press Enter.44 While pressing Ctrl. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . under Mechanical.

and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile.rvt.Design to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. at the lower left corner of the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. 9 On the Options Bar. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and double-click Level 1 . click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 10 In the drawing area. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 8 In the Type Selector. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . the space crossing lines display.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.200 Neck. click 1 : 100. for Scale.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.HVAC Plan . select M_Supply Diffuser . expand HVAC .

Airflow. 15 Press Esc. type 6000. Under Mechanical . the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. As a result. for Offset. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. for Flow. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. enter 2400. under Constraints. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . By copying the diffuser. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. move the cursor down. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. and then press Enter. 11 Select the diffuser. Also. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. enter 170 L/s. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Click OK.

19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. clear Leader. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then press Esc. 18 On the Options Bar.16 Using the same method. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right.

tile the windows. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. under space 115. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. under Other. For Category. for Sort by. select Mark. mark. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click View Properties. and then right-click in the schedule. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. click Edit. under Available Fields. for Flow. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. 26 Using the method learned previously. it is a negative value. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. select Air Terminals. double-click System Type. Mark. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. and press Enter.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. and Flow. select 21. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. 29 Using the same method. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 25 Click OK 3 times. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Embedded Schedule. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. Type. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). enter 210 L/s. type. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. 27 In the schedule. Next.

and maximize Level 1 . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. As you highlight the zone. as shown. 31 In the drawing area.HVAC Plan . select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.Design. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 35 In the Type Selector. select M_WSHP .97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.High Efficiency .3 times the heating load). verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.7-18 kW .Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog.43 W (approximately 1. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.Horizontal . 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. 33 Click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 36 In the drawing area. and under Energy Analysis.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Constraints ➤ Offset. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. click Training Files. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click View ➤ Systems. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter . all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. the space crossing lines display. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. including energy analysis. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. However. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 44 Zoom in to space 115. right-click the title. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. As you add diffusers to systems.Design is highlighted.rvt. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. In this exercise. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. After creating the logical connection. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you highlight a space. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building.

Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. review the Number of Elements. the number of elements is updated. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. and Flow value. and the system connects them. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 15 Click Cancel. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 17 Using the method learned previously. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Connect Into. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. the air terminals are the children. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 18 Click OK. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). On the Options Bar. 11 In the drawing area.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. System Name. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 12 In the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. which updates the name in the System Browser. under Mechanical.rvt. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 26 Click Finish Editing System. you create ductwork to physically connect system components.Rename the system Next. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. under Identity Data. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. for System Name. 25 Click OK. In this exercise. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. for Mark. 22 Click OK. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

for Solution Type. 5 On the Options Bar. enter 3000. A Generate Layout tab displays. For Duct Type. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. For Offset. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. which provides various layout tools. 4 In the drawing area.Round. the Network type provides several solutions. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. For Offset. indicating that it’s the active view. the space crossing lines display. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 7 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. In this case. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Also. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. For Duct Type. click Settings.HVAC Plan. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. Select Branch. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. For Flex Duct Type. enter 3000. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. select Network.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. select the upper left diffuser. and display solution 1.

■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . or manually modify the duct. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Click OK. as is the elbow itself. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. as shown. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. For example. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. or offset elevations are incorrect. click Modify. 11 Click Finish Layout. Either relocate the system components. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. enter 900. select a different layout solution. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. you’ll get an error in a later step.

a disconnection exists. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. select Duct Color Fill . thus it is not part of the system. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. and equipment.Flow. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Usually. and click to select it. and click OK. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. If the entire network does not highlight.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. highlight a segment of the main duct. Using a flow-based color scheme. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. fittings. for Color Scheme. The first time you press Tab. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect.

17 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. but not all values are used in this view. select By View.Airflow. under Graphics. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. select the WSHP. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Mechanical . and click OK. select one of the diffusers in the system. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and then click OK. and press Enter. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. for Flow. 20 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. for Values Displayed. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.

The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and drag it to the right. Select Only.65 Pa/m. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Calculated Size Only. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Select the upper segment of main duct. Click OK. click Cancel. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. for Branch Sizing. Select Restrict Height. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and then click to select it.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. highlight a segment of the duct. select the color scheme legend. Under Constraints. 26 Click OK. and enter . Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. select Friction. and select 400. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. for Schemes. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and then press Esc to clear the selection. select Duct Color Fill .Velocity. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP).

Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). so that you can modify the system design accordingly. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. static pressure. pressure. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Using this tool.The ductwork and fittings are updated. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Use the information that displays (flow. and pressure loss. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection).

34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. click Training Files. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 35 Click Finish. also known as the critical path. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.rvt. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise.NOTE As you inspect a system.

2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Plan . and click Draw Duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and select the WSHP. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design is highlighted.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).

10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. right-click the connector grip. 15 On the ViewCube. Front. and click Draw Duct. NOTE When drawing duct. click the corner where the Top. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . double-click MEP . select the top right diffuser. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 3000. for Offset. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 .3D MEP. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.8 Press Esc twice to end the command.

21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. in space 115. The ductwork is automatically created. 19 In the drawing area.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. it is considered a closed loop.

Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.22 Using the same method. You can ignore the warning. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 24 Select the remaining diffusers.

29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. and then click Modify. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 30 Press Esc twice.

clear Restrict Height. and click to select it. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. select a segment of the main duct. under Mechanical . 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.Airflow. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). and then click OK. for Flow. under Constraints. 40 Using the same method. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. such as a plenum. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK.

108 .

In this lesson. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. 109 . and a cooling tower located on the roof. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. on level 3 of the building model.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Create return and supply piping systems. including 2 base mounted pumps. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Then. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode.

5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Design is highlighted.Left Return . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. in corridor 328.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. click Training Files.Horizontal High Efficiency . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.7-18kW . and select M_WSHP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

7 On the Options Bar. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click the dimension.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to place the dimension. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 10 Select the WSHP. and enter 600. 8 Click the corridor wall face. as shown. verify that Wall faces is selected. click the top edge of the WSHP.

and in the Type Selector. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. select the 2 WSHPs. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .) 14 Click Modify.11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Under Mechanical. enter 0. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. as shown. enter 2750.75 L/s. for Water Flow. Click OK. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 21 Click Modify.

analyses cannot be performed. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.22 Close the file with or without saving it. including flow and pressure. Unlike logical connections (systems). Create pipes to physically connect the system components. you create the return and supply piping systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. but without a corresponding system. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. You can create pipes to connect system components. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

This display indicates that the system is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Piping System | 115 . 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. In the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. and click View ➤ Piping.Mech 330). As you assign equipment to systems. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Therefore. 5 In the System Browser. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . right-click the Systems column heading.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . select the 2 WSHPs. click Training Files. while pressing Ctrl.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. where it is easier to review the information. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

for System Name. 10 On the Options Bar. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. for System Name.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 17 On the Options Bar. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. and the Edit System tool is not active. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Notice that on the Options Bar. select the boiler. You have created the hydronic return system. 13 Click Finish Editing System. 12 In the drawing area. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.

and select the cooling tower. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). Creating a Piping System | 117 . and click OK. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.HVAC Plan . 25 Select the boiler. In cooling mode. double-click Roof . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. In heating mode. under Design ➤ HVAC . 23 Close the roof plan view.Design. 19 In the Project Browser.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. and bypasses the cooling tower. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system.

31 In the Column Settings dialog. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. expand the Hydronic Return system category. and click Expand All. and click Properties. enter 0.8. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 28 Using the same method. for Water Flow. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 32 In the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. under Mechanical. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select. expand Piping. and click OK. indicating the logical connection. and click OK. You also manually modify the layout path as required. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click Column Settings. you can view several parameters. including the flow rate and size of the component. 29 Right-click CHWS. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser.

you can place the cursor over a system component. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 In the Filter dialog. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). select Mechanical Equipment. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .HVAC Plan . and click OK. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). A system preview displays in red. When you draw a box to select components. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.HVAC plan view range are highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. click Training Files. and click to select it. click Check None.Design is highlighted. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. the boiler. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . then the Select a System dialog displays. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.rvt. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. press Tab to highlight the system. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. indicating that it’s the active view. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Mech 330).

12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. structural beams. 11 On the Options Bar. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. click Settings. 13 Click Cancel. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. or architectural components. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. verify that Solutions is selected. duct. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. enter 450. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. For Inset.9 In the Select a System dialog. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. select CHWR. 10 Click OK. It does not reference the architecture. select Perimeter. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800.

the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. and press Tab 3 times. to display the path with thinner lines.75 L/s. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . Verify the flow In a previous exercise. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. 17 Optionally.16 Click Finish Layout. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. With each Tab. the flow for each WSHP is 0. 19 In the drawing area. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects.

This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. and access its instance properties. and click OK. 23 Under Mechanical.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.75 L/s).50 L/s. and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 22 Select the boiler. notice that the Water Flow is 1. verify that the value for Flow is 1.50 L/s. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 24 Press Esc. under Mechanical. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left.

26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Design. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 32 Click Finish Editing System. the Number of Elements is now 8. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. On the Options Bar. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 28 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).HVAC Plan . click Edit System. Logically. 27 On the System Tools panel. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . double-click Level 1 .

50 L/s. which propagates flow throughout the system. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. note that the value for Flow is 4. and click Cancel.44 L/s. 38 Using the same method. access its instance properties. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. as shown.94 L/s. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . under Mechanical.94 L/s. Next. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. 35 Using the drag control. you physically close the CHWR loop.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. so the total flow of 6.

40 In the Select a System dialog.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 41 Click OK. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. and then click OK. Click Settings. For Slope. select CHWS. select a WSHP. select Perimeter 1 of 5.00%. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. enter 450. For Inset. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. enter 0.

The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 46 Click Modify. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. 47 In the drawing area. In a later exercise.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. (Both sections are at the same elevation.

and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. or offset elevations are incorrect. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). as shown. 50 Using the same method. 51 Click Finish Layout. Either relocate the system components. To create the piping system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise.

indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. and the return pipes are magenta. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. As you work in the training file.Design ➤ 3D Views. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.rvt.HVAC Plan . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. double-click 3D Building. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design is highlighted. click Training Files. as shown.

Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. as shown. select the section of piping. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 7 In the plan view.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Esc to clear the selection. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. 9 In the 3D view. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. select the boiler. Click to specify the reference point.

select the boiler. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. The connections are automatically created. and the lower one is secondary. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. select the return pipe riser.11 In the Select Connector dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 12 In the 3D view. 13 In the plan view. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and click OK. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and click Draw Pipe. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. and press Enter. and you select 1 connector. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. enter 381. ■ Move the cursor down. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .In a plan view. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. for Offset. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. enter 600. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 18 Press Esc twice. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. select the primary base mounted pump. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and the appropriate fittings are created. 21 In the Select Connector dialog.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and click OK. 19 In the plan view. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. As you place piping runs that are close together. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In.

and select it. and click the minus symbol. as shown. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. you select the tee fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. right-click the bottom connector. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click to draw the pipe.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays.27 Move the cursor to the right. click to connect to the pump.

28 Press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. enter 1200. right-click the discharge connector. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Offset. select the primary base mounted pump. 29 If necessary.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.33 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically.

upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 35 Using the method learned previously. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click Draw Pipe.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. as shown.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . for Offset. type 300.■ Move the cursor down. and press Enter. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and click to create the pipe. enter 2850.

37 Click Modify. Next. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You now have a closed loop system. you validate the flow through the system.

48 In the plan view. right-click.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. for Cooling Water Flow. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . view the properties for the secondary pump. Connect the cooling tower Next. 41 Using the same method. under Mechanical. The flow is being propagated through the piping. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. right-click.44 L/s. 43 Press Esc.50 or 50% of the Flow. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 40 Click Cancel. select the cooling tower.44 L/s). and click OK. the value is 0 L/s. In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. When you create the pumps in parallel. 44 In the 3D view. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. as shown. notice that Flow is 6. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. notice that under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. which is rounded up to 3.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. 46 Press Esc.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.44 L/s. 49 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . select the cooling tower. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 50 In the 3D View.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. and close the dialog.

indicating that it’s the active view.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. the water bypasses the cooling tower. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and is heated by the boiler. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). When the valve is open. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. Adding Valves In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.52 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. click Training Files. as shown.

NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 8 Press Esc twice. and select M_Ball Valve . The bypass valve is closed by default. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Valves | 145 . and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.4 On the Options Bar.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method. parallel to the previously placed valve. place another M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.10 Press Esc. 12 Select M_Ball Valve .

18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Valves | 147 . For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). and click OK. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. under Mechanical.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.44 L/s. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. right-click. validate that the Flow is 6. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. 19 Using the same method.

validate that the Flow is 6. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 20 Select the bypass valve. and select M_Ball Valve . 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and select M_Ball Valve .44 L/s.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. click Training Files. Initially. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. In heating mode. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Using the method you just learned.44 L/s. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).

and click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Pipe Color Fill .HVAC Plan . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Size. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. click Pipe Color Fill . as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. Sizing Pipe | 149 . and click OK.Flow. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.Design is highlighted. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. for Schemes.

5 m/s. or manually modify the pipe. select Friction. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. enter 1. Click OK. or offset elevations are incorrect. and for Velocity. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 13 Press Esc. and click to select the branch. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Branch Sizing. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Under Constraints. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Either relocate the system components. Select And.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. select a different layout solution. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. and enter 220 Pa/m.

2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. pressure. Inspecting the System In this exercise. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspecting the System | 151 . click Training Files. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.14 Close the file with or without saving it. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Using the System Inspector. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.rvt. and double-click 3D Building.

5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and pressure information including pressure loss. flow. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. as required. This information helps you modify the system design. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. An inspection flag reports the section number.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. as shown. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).

you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Note that the Flow is 1. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. the Static Pressure is 41916. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.Design.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. 9 Using the same method.7. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and to size pipe. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. inspect Section 6 again. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .0 L/s. select 32° C. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.4 Pa. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Click Finish. click Training Files. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. targeting those systems that need attention. for Fluid Temperature. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you need to validate them.HVAC Plan . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.1 Pa. Warnings display. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3 . In this exercise.

You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.HVAC Plan . the pipe is associated with that system.HVAC Plan . 6 In the Project Browser. and select Level 3 . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. 4 In the System Browser. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. 10 Using the same methods. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 9 Right-click CHWS. and click View. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. right-click Hydronic Return. As you learned when placing components. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. After you assign components to a system. and click Show to view all of the system components. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. expand the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all components to systems. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. TIP If you have multiple views open.Design floor plan. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder.Design. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. If you place components without assigning them to a system. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the System Browser. and click Expand All. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system).Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Close.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. and confirm unassigned system components. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . thus assigning the components to a system. right-click the Systems titlebar. For example. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. double-click Level 1 . otherwise. 12 In the System Browser. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. 7 In the System Browser. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. and for pipe sizing. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected.

15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.13 Right-click CHWR. 14 Using the methods that you learned. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

156 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 157 .

158 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

select 90. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. enter THHN. expand Wiring . wiring. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. As you place components and create circuits. click (Open). and demand factors that are applied in the design. select Copper. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. For Temperature.rvt.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. enter 1. select Wiring Types. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. You also add a wiring type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. ■ Click New Correction Factor. speeding up the design phase. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .04. ■ ■ For Material. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. distribution systems. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Click OK. Select Correction Factor.Wire Sizes. For Factor. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select Copper. For Material. enter 70.

select 240. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. select Hot Conductor Size. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. select Power. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. For Wires. select Steel. Under More Than. select 75. Select Neutral Required. enter 250. For Phase. For Value. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Neutral Multiplier. Click OK. enter 240. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select Demand Factors. select Distribution Systems. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . select 120. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. select Single. For Conduit Type. By specifying a range.0. For L-L Voltage. enter 1. For Minimum. enter 240. enter 120/240. For Maximum. select 10000 VA. select THHN. select 3. For Neutral Size. For Max Size. select Voltage Definitions. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. enter 2000. For Insulation. Click Split. enter 220. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 50. For L-G Voltage.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. select Spaces. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. restrooms. Under Categories. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog.Lighting. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. and double-click Level 2 .Lighting group in the space element properties. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . its value becomes the Required Lighting Level.Lighting Plan. under the Electrical . click (Open). zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. Verify that Instance is selected. In this case the key style is the type of space and. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. select Illuminance. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. click Training Files.rvt. For Group Parameter Under. such as offices. select Electrical. and conference rooms. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Later in the tutorial.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the drawing area. enter Required Lighting Level. select Electrical . For Type of Parameter. click Add. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . For Discipline. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Click OK twice. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level).Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan.

enter Open Office. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Lighting Levels. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. double-click Required Lighting Level. under Electrical .Lighting. enter Space Lighting Requirements. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. and for Key Name. and click OK. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. Click OK. Select Schedule Keys. Click OK. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. enter 485. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. under Available Fields. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. select Spaces. For Name.

The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. 21 Click OK twice. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 22 Using the same method. Select Blank Line. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit. change the sort order back to the default setting.Lighting Plan. which is mapped to project units. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. select Required Lighting Level. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . for Sorting/Grouping. Notice that as you enter the data.

In this exercise. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. select Instruction-Standard. that Required Lighting Level is blank. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. 27 Click OK. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. click (Open). You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. the value input applies only to the selected space. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . for Lighting Levels. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Later in this exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.

For example. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .00 lx. click (Add Value) again. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. and click (Add Value). 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. enter 200. select Required Lighting Level.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify the By Range is selected. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200.rvt.00 lx. enter 900. click (Duplicate).00. and press ENTER. and in the At Least column. Select the scheme for At Least 20. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after.00. and press Enter. then the new value will be 400 lx. ■ Click OK. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. for Title. and click (Add Value) five times. For Color. enter Required Lighting and click OK. and press ENTER. enter 800. for Category. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. Select the scheme for 500 lx. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. Select the scheme for 450. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. Under Schemes.00 lx. 00 lx still selected. enter Required Lighting Levels. click Training Files. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. select Spaces. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. for Name.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Click OK. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. select Illuminance. For Type. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 Click Calculated Value. For Name. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 .Lighting CF. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Lighting Delta. select Required Lighting. select Spaces. select Electrical. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. For Discipline. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. and Required Lighting Level. 8 In the drawing area. Average Estimated Illumination. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Color Scheme. Level. double-click Number. Name. for Available Fields.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2 . select Spaces. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.

On the Formatting tab. Click Conditional Format. select Level. Select Blank Line. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. type a hyphen. click Browse. Click OK three times. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. for Fields. Click OK. select Required Lighting Level. select Red. for Custom Colors. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Click OK twice. select Average Estimated Illumination. press the spacebar. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. for Test. select Not Between. select Lighting Delta. and click Browse. for Formula. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. Select Header. For Value. Click Background Color. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.■ For Formula. for Sort by. under Condition.

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .

170 .

Use the System Browser to check your design.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. 171 . power circuits. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Then. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. First. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. as you place lighting fixtures. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create power loads. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create a panel schedule. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values.

Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . select Orange. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. select Average Estimated Illumination. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . click Training Files. Under Scheme Definition.Lighting CF view is open. 7 In the Project Browser. In the Color dialog. select the color legend. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 8 In the Project Browser. Click OK. click (Open).Lighting Ceiling plan. for the Spaces Category. 2 In the drawing area. By using orange as the color for this range. You can create additional color schemes. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. for Basic Colors. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 13 Click the Level 2 . all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . which is the lowest value in the specified range.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. zoom to space Library 219. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.

Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.277V. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 18 Click to place the fixture. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 Select the lighting fixture. the fixtures will move accordingly. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically.5 fc range.5 fc range is satisfied.the +/. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

00 VA. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. enter 162. for Name enter and click OK. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Apparent Load. scroll to view space space Library 219. ■ Under Electrical Loads. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Name dialog. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx.

specify 15000.85. 2 In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. for Color Preset. Click OK. In the next exercise. and click OK. and receptacles to your design. enter . for Type Mark. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Junction Boxes. ■ Click Apply. click the value for Initial Color. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. you add switches. select Luminous Flux.93. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. select T5 [HO]. Under Photometrics. select 463T5_S. 9 In space Library 219. enter . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. Junction Boxes.rvt. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Placing Switches. for Lamp. and Receptacles | 183 . In the Select File dialog. junction boxes. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Under Electrical. Under Photometrics. click (Open).ies and click Open. for Ballast Loss Factor. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. select Xenon and click OK. select the top center fixture. ■ Click OK twice. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Under Photometrics.00 lm. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. ■ Under Photometrics. enter F15. Placing Switches. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. click the value for Initial Intensity. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation.

4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V. 7 Click to place the switch. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .

NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. The element type M_Junction Boxes . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.rfa and click Open. Select M_Junction Boxes . and Receptacles | 185 . 9 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.NoLoad. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Load Family dialog.

zoom to space Library 219. enter 2750. note the Number of Poles is 1. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click Edit Type. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. for Mark. Under Electrical. 15 Select the junction box. for Level 2 .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view.Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . enter JB-1NL. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.14 Press ESC to end the command. In the Type Properties dialog. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. NOTE When entering values.

22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 23 In the System Browser. 26 In the System Browser. Expand General. NOTE If necessary. Select Load. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Expand Electrical. Space Number. Space Name. Select Size. Click OK. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. and Number of Elements. Distribution System. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. right-click and click Column Settings. and Voltage. Junction Boxes. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Placing Switches. 24 For any column. and Receptacles | 187 . Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219.

34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 31 Close the System Browser. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.

40 On the Options Bar. Junction Boxes. move the cursor along the wall. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and Receptacles | 189 . 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Placing Switches. and enter 3650 and press ENTER.

enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 43 Press ESC to end the command.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. and Receptacles | 191 . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

2 In the drawing area. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. and work toward the higher voltage. zoom to the space Electrical 220. click (Open). main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).rvt. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Surface: 100A.208V MCB . click Training Files. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Adding wiring to a project is optional.equipment.

14 Select the panelboard. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. enter LP-2B. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. for Distribution System. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 480/277 Wye. enter 20. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 8 Select the panelboard. For Panel Name.Loads. enter 20.480V MCB . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . select 120/208 Wye. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter PP-2B. Click OK. Click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 On the Options Bar. 7 Press ESC to end the command. #1 Pole Breakers. for Max. 15 On the Options Bar. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. For Panel Name. for Max.Loads. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.

23 In the Filter dialog.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. and for Category. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . which is the logical connection between the elements. click Check None.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Instruction 221. 20 In the drawing area. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Click OK. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 28 Press ESC to end the command. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.

32 Press ESC.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 33 Select the switch on the right. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 38 Press ESC to end the command. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

and for Category. click Training Files. 42 In the Filter dialog. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. select Wires. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Click OK. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. for Hot Conductors. click (Open). Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Check None. and create permanent wiring.39 Using the same method.rvt. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. except without wire. enter 2. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .Loads.

4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 13 In the System Browser. Rating. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Distribution System. right-click on the Systems heading. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and Voltage Drop are selected. and verify that Load. Voltage. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Electrical. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Click OK. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and then expand circuit 1. expand Power.

The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 30 Close the System Browser. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. change the Voltage to 277V. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click Tags. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. under Electrical. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected.

under Identity Data. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Click Yes. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. Click OK. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. select Break. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 40 Click OK twice. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. for Type Mark. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. enter FR4. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click below the first one to place it. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 47 In the drawing area. For Circuit Number. click Edit Type. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated.

■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. for File Name. enter a comma. and for Category. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). Click Save. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 52 In the Save As dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 54 Select all of the tags. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m.rvt. 57 In the Filter dialog. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. Next you create a switch system. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. and click Apply. click Training Files. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Click OK.rfa. Click OK. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Check None.

under Electrical Lighting. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. for Switch ID. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. enter a. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 2 In the drawing area. Creating a Switch System | 205 . Click OK. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Click OK. enter b. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. for switch ID. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.Lighting. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures.

10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 7 In space Electrical 220. and for Category. enter 2.26 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. Click OK. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. click (Open). 4 In the Filter dialog. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Click OK. for Hot Conductors. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and data systems. click Training Files. select the PP-2B panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating Power Loads | 207 . select Electrical Fixtures. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. lighting. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. and click Element Properties. click Check None. Circuits are used for power. under Electrical .Loads. 2 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

and click Open. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. and in the drawing area. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and click to select the circuit. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. for Ground Wire Tick Mark.rfa. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark.13 Select the wire again. select Wiring. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. and in the right pane.

as shown. 28 In the drawing area. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 29 In space Instruction 221. select the PP-2B panel. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 26 Press Delete. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. as shown. 22 In space Electrical 220. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click the connector of the first receptacle. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. in space Instruction 221.

210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Next you balance the loads for your design. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 31 Close the file with or without saving it.

click Training Files. enter 30A. 2 In the drawing area. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 1-#12. Scroll down. click Open. 1-#10. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. After re-balancing loads. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Had there been a greater imbalance. zoom to space Electrical 220. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 6 Click OK. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Under Electrical-Loads. 1-#10. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 In the Electrical space. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. click Rebalance Loads. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 1-#12.rvt. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. the distribution is shifted. select panel LP-2B. Finally. for Rating.

22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. enter 40A. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. and click OK. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 17 Close the warning dialog.Loads. under Electrical . 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. and click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Rating. and click Finish Editing Circuit. select the transformer TP-2B. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.Loads. 15 Select panel PP-2B. under Electrical . 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 14 Close the warning dialog. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 12 Select panel PP-2B. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. Next you create a panel schedule. for Rating. enter 25A. 24 Click Select Panel.

5 In the Project Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. for Font Size. click Edit. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. The Panel Schedule Report displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. click (Open). enter 4 mm. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. Under Header Text. Select PP-2B. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . expand Sheets (all). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. for Font Size. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Font. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 4 Close the report. select Bold and Italic. 6 In the Project Browser. select Berlin Sans FB. 10 Click OK twice. and open E601 .Panel Schedules. click Training Files. Click OK.rvt. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. Under Body Text. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. for Appearance. enter 5 mm. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Under Header Text. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet.

In the System Browser. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. press TAB once. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. click Training Files. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. select space Lounge 212. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. each with a load of 180VA. click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. Expand Unassigned.

In the System Browser. 15 In the dialog. 17 In the drawing area. zoom to space Electrical 214. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. under Warnings. select MDP-1. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 .12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 16 Close the details dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. for Panel. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits.

216 .

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

Design ➤ Floor Plans. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. you create a PVC pipe type. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. planning is critical to a successful design. 4 In the Name dialog. type PVC .Sanitary. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 2 In the Project Browser. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In this exercise. In this lesson. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and click Properties.Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 . Adding a pipe size. in addition to loading existing families. click Training Files.Plumbing Plan . right-click PVC . and click OK. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.rvt. 219 . 3 In the Type Properties dialog.Vent. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.

26 Click OK. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. enter 10°. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. and click OK. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. enter -1250. Cross. and open Metric\M_Trap P . 18 For System Type.Sch 40 . select M_Tee Sanitary . select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. enter 45.DWV: Standard.PVC . select Sanitary. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.Vent is listed. click Training Files.DWV: Standard. 21 In the right pane. under Pipe Types. select Tee. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 27 For the new pipe size. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 10 On the Selection panel. 13 In the right panel. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. select Branch.PVC .Sch 40 .Sch 40 . click Modify. for Material. enter 46. for Nominal. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 22 Click New Size. and click Main. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . Tee. 25 For Outside. click Pipe Settings. 17 In the left pane.000 mm. select Plastic.293 mm. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. In the Project Browser. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 15 For System Type. PVC . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.DWV. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For Offset. select Sanitary. Tap. 24 For Inside Diameter. select None.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.006 mm. enter 54.PVC .rfa. under Mechanical. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 6 Click OK.

Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. and hot and cold water piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. 221 . Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. Create the hot water system. add a hot water heater. Create the sanitary plumbing system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the cold water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. including plumbing fixtures. vent.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

for example. as shown. at the midpoint of the detail lines. A preview of the piping layout displays. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . a toilet. and click OK. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. select Sanitary 107. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 16 In the Select a System dialog.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base is placed. select one of the components in the system.

20 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -350 mm. The default settings are automatically modified. You accept this suggested solution.Sanitary. select 100 mm. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. select PVC . and for Offset. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout.05%. click Solutions. for Solution Type. select Intersections. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. and click OK. and modify it to meet project requirements. select PVC . select Branch. for Slope. enter -350 mm. enter 1. 27 For Offset. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.19 On the Options Bar. 21 On Options Bar. 23 For Pipe Type. 25 In the left pane. for Diameter. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.Sanitary. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 26 For Pipe Type. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. and click Settings. 28 On the Options Bar. select Main. enter -1225. 29 On the Options Bar. 24 For Offset. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 30 Click Modify.

32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 34 Click Modify.33 In the 3D view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown.

36 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. 37 On the Generate Layout panel.

234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When a fitting is reversed.Overall. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.

and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and check the slope control. you continue with the work from the last exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.

verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. click Training Files. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 560 mmx560 mm . 4 On the Element panel. in the Type Selector.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Public.Rectangular. under M_Lavatory .Design is open. 5 On the Placement panel. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.rvt.

Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. select Multiple. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .7 Click Modify.2. On the Options Bar. and press Enter to create a second sink. enter 711. 8 Select the sink.

expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Press Esc. enter 711. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.2.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. click Add To System. and press Enter to create the third sink. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 11 In the System Browser. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Click the 3 sinks.

notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. use the ViewCube to orient the view. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 21 Select the tee.16 On the Edit System panel. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Overall. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D Plumbing . 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ 3D Views. In the System Browser. 19 In the 3D view. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. as shown. 20 Select the fitting. click Finish Editing System. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 .

26 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. and click to draw the pipe. press Spacebar. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. for Offset. enter 1. and click Draw Pipe.05%. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . with the tee fitting selected. enter 760 mm. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). When you press the Spacebar. and click Apply.22 In the plan view. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. for Slope.

and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.DWV. 29 In the Type Selector. and when the vertical center line displays.Sch 40 . under M_Wye 45 Deg Double .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . click to place the fitting. 31 Click Modify. 30 In the 3D view.PVC . 32 Select the double wye fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe.

on the Options Bar. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter. enter 150 mm. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. enter 305 mm. 36 In the section view. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. In the next steps. right-click the right connector. 34 Press Esc. 37 Select the fitting.33 With the fitting selected. double-click the section head to open the section view. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting.

42 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). as shown. 41 Using the same method. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 40 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.

Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 49 Using the same method. and press Esc. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the bottom connector. press Spacebar.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 48 Click Modify. enter 150 mm. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. 47 Move the cursor down. 46 In the section view.

51 In the Type Selector. 53 Using the same method. under M_Trap P .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. select the P-Trap on the left.Sch 40 . 54 Click Modify. 56 Using the same method. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.DWV. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 55 In the 3D view. 52 In the plan view. select Standard.PVC .

. Click in the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. select the left P-Trap. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 58 Using the same method. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click Modify. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. connect the right sink to the double wye. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. and press Enter.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. In the plan view. enter 150 mm.

while pressing Ctrl. under Pipe Types. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. On the Routing Solutions panel. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.■ In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. and select a proposed solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . as shown. while pressing Ctrl. Press Esc. select PVC Sanitary. click Finish to select the recommended solution. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. select the section of pipe you just drew.

62 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. click Training Files.05% is selected. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. adjusting the sanitary stack. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. verify that 1. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. for Slope. and verify the slope.rvt. click Finish.

and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click the intersection to place the fitting.DWV. click Modify.Overall. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. select Standard. as shown.Design. select the elbow fitting on the right. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Design. 7 On the Selection panel. 3 In the Section view.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. right-click the top connector.Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click to draw the pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 9 In the Type Selector. 10 In the 3D view.PVC . select the vertical stack. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Floor level line. and click Draw Pipe. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Sch 40 . 5 Select the tee.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

2 Right-click Standard. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. 267 . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. In this tutorial. In this lesson. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. However. and click Duplicate. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.rvt. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. you can choose to save your work. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.autodesk. click Training Files. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. You create a new pipe type. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. go to http://www.

select Carbon Steel. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. For System Type. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. For Pipe Type. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. under Mechanical. you create project parameters and work with schedules. For Offset. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 6 In the Project Browser. For Offset. select Main. In this exercise. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. structural beams. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. click Rename. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. For Pipe Type. 9 Click OK. Next. for Material. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Properties. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. verify that 2800 is specified. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. or architectural components. and then click OK. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. However. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. you modify the type properties of the pipe. and enter Fire Protection Wet. verify that 2800 is selected. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. In the next exercise. duct. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Fire Protection Wet.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). In the left pane. select Fire Protection Wet. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping.

click Add.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. and click Element Properties. 5 Click OK twice. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 In the drawing area. click Training Files. For Group parameter under. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 8 Using a crossing window. enter Zone 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Fire Protection. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog.Fire Protection Piping Plan . the space crossing lines display. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. for Sprinkler Zone. select space Instruction 221 as shown. for Name. select the upper half of the building. select Fire Protection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Sprinkler Zone. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Under Categories. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Spaces. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . and then click OK. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.rvt. When you highlight a space using the cursor. right-click.Design is highlighted.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Zone 2. and then click OK. select Zone 1. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection. and click OK. 10 In the Filter dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m.rvt. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. 13 Using the same method. for Sprinkler Zone. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and then click OK. verify that only Spaces are selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. click Training Files. and then access instance properties. you create schedules for sprinkler design. to which you add various parameters. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. including a calculated value parameter.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog.

For Rounding. 11 Click OK twice. select mm. 10 In the Format dialog. select 0 decimal places. select Spaces. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. The schedule displays. For Name. For Group parameter under. enter Maximum Spacing. click the Formatting tab. For Type of Parameter.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. select Maximum Spacing.Design is highlighted. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter Protection Area Construction Type. Select Schedule keys. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 7 Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. double-click on each column separator. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. for Name. and click Field Format. For Unit symbol. click Add Parameter. select Millimeters. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 14 Select the new header. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 9 On the Formatting tab. Obstructed-Combustible. select Length. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Fire Protection. enter Light. Click OK. and on the ribbon. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 6 Using the same method. For Key name. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Units.

select Spaces. and press Enter. Unobstructed Ordinary. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. For Name. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Click OK. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter 4575. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter 40. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed Extra. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light.

19 Click the Formatting tab. under Available fields.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. Click OK. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 22 Click OK twice. and click OK. click . For Formula. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Type. For Units. select Area. For Discipline. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select Minimum Sprinklers. 20 On the Formatting tab. and click Field Format. select 0 decimal place. In the Fields dialog. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. select Number. For Rounding. Enter the formula operator / after Area. select Common. select Fixed.

for Sort by. Under Field formatting.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. verify that Use default settings is selected. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Hidden field. select Level. under Other. ■ In the Format dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. and select Totals only. At the bottom of the dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. select Level. select Number. and then click Field Format. For Fields. For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. Select Header and Blank line. for Sorting/Grouping. click Edit. For Then by. select Grand totals. and then select Hidden field. For Then by (second instance). The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and click View Properties. select Minimum Sprinklers. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Header and Blank line.

click Edit. for Filter by. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. and select Totals only. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. for Filter. click Edit. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. for Available fields. select Count. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. under Other. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers.27 In the drawing area. and Count. select Embedded Schedule. for Fields. On the Formatting tab. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Sprinklers. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. for Embedded Schedule. Under Field formatting. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. and click View Properties. double-click Type. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. For Category. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Grand totals. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. select Calculate totals. 30 Click OK twice. select Level equals Level 2. System Name. right-click the schedule. and click View Properties. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. delete the word Maximum.

Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. and access the instance properties. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . As a result. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Unobstructed. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 48 In the floor plan. select space 221 Instruction.Fire Protection Plan Design. for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. and the spacing parameter values are evident. Unobstructed.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). you are actually editing information in a database of building information. for Protection Area Construction Type. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Ordinary. 46 With the space still selected. select space 221 Instruction. select Ordinary. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 50 Access the instance properties. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 41 In the plan view. under Identity Data. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 43 Click Cancel. select Light. double-click FP . but their values are not determined. under Identity Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 44 In the schedule. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 52 Click OK.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. click Training Files. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.autodesk. At the end of this tutorial. you will understand the process. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. As you place the sprinklers. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. methodology. go to http://www. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. After finishing each exercise. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.rvt.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. and double-click Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. As you create the system. By following the recommended workflow. However. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you can choose to save your work. 279 .FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . After placing the initial sprinkler. 3 In the Project Browser. When this happens. When there is a small misalignment. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.

verify that Constrain is cleared. and click to place 3 sprinklers. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and 207. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. 9 In space Instruction 202. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. select the sprinklers that you placed. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 10 Press Esc twice. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Also. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. 206. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 11 In the drawing area.

18 Type WT. and 200C). you place non-hosted sprinklers. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.Design. 17 In the Project Browser.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 200B. Next. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. specify a vertical offset. open Design ➤ FP . Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.

and press Enter. move the cursor to the right. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . enter 11. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. After creating the logical connection. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Next. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 Click OK.19 In the floor plan. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point.FP_Ceiling view. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. For Number. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. and with piping (physical connection). Notice that the schedule updates. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers.0. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the next exercise. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. and click Element Properties. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. In this exercise. enter 4100. This number is determined in the schedule. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. you adjust the offset. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. enter 2900 mm. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. under Constraints. for Offset. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 29 Press Esc. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.

Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.Fire Protection Plan . This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click View ➤ Systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. As you assign sprinklers to systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 5 Right-click the header. However. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 1 In the Project Browser. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Piping. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . as shown. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. Unlike logical connections (systems).

The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. 11 With the system still selected. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. press Tab. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. place the cursor over a sprinkler. Creating a Piping System | 285 . 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. select an initial piping layout. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and select the system. named Fire Protection Wet. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. indicating the logical connection. In the System Browser. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. within the Piping Systems folder. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and click Select. Next. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers.

select Branch. system equipment. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. and number of elements in the system. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm).The Edit Piping System panel displays. for Diameter. select 150 mm. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 15 In the drawing area.0 is specified. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. and on the Options Bar. For Offset. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. click Settings. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 13 In the System Browser. verify that Main is selected. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. and a piping layout preview displays. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. providing system editing tools. For Pipe Type. 22 On the Options Bar. verify that 2800.Wet is selected. 12 On the Options Bar. 19 Click OK. The Generate Layout tools are activated. click Place Base. enter FP Wet_Zone2. click Solutions. for System Name. enter -3650. In the left pane. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 23 For Offset. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 14 Click Finish Editing System. When the layout is finished. as shown. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

A (parallel movement control) displays. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. click Modify. In general. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. On the Generate Layout panel. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. and green represents branch lines). Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and select solution 4. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. Creating a Piping System | 287 .25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. verify that Network is selected. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. select a different layout solution. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 29 Click Finish Layout. as shown. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 32 If necessary. Either relocate the system components. or that offset elevations are incorrect. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . or manually modify the pipe. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.

3 If necessary.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and select the elbow fitting as shown. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.33 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and then you create piping to physically connect them. the Connect Into tool. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. and various manual pipe creation tools.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 2 Zoom in.rvt. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Next. indicating that it’s the active view.

mechanical equipment. radiators.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and pipe or duct is created. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 9 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. or a system component to display system tools. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). you can select the pipe or duct. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . air terminals. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. click Add To System. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 8 In the corridor. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 5 In the drawing area. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2.

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. verify that Network is selected. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. verify that Solutions is selected. 23 View the result in the 3D view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 In the Piping Plan. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and then tile the views. for Solution Type. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area.11 On the Generate Layout panel. 14 Close the System Browser. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 12 On the Options Bar. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 18 Click Finish Editing System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and select solution 5. 13 Click Finish Layout. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping.

right-click. 25 Select the sprinkler. 28 In the drawing area. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Offset. and then press Esc. select 2800. and click Draw Pipe. 27 On the Options Bar. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 29 Using the same method.24 In the Piping Plan. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.

31 In the plan view. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because the whole system highlights. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .rvt. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. for Scale. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.Fire Protection Piping Plan . Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. select 1 : 50.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. click Training Files. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.

and click View Properties.6 Press Esc. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 8 Right-click. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

Click OK.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. and then click Modify. and then right-click the top connector. Under Identity Data. and press Enter. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Fire Protection Plan . and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . drag the top section boundary line up. 22 In the drawing area. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. enter FP Section_Stair.Design the active view. select MEP Section. and click Draw Pipe. enter 2135. select FP .Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. for View Name. For Default View Template.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 19 Make Level 2 . click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. 10 In the Project Browser. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. For View Classification. right-click Design ➤ FP . 14 Select the tee fitting. 13 Select the elbow fitting. 12 If necessary. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. and click Apply Default View Template. 17 Move the cursor up. for Sub-Discipline. select Design.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Design.

select . 24 Select the cabinet. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 26 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. zoom to the hose reel cabinet.23 In the section view. and click Draw Pipe. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . and then click Modify. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. verify that Automatically Connect is active.

verify that M_Gate Valve . Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. 31 In the alert dialog. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . 33 In the Type Selector.29 Close the section view. and click Open.50 mm is selected. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. and then click Modify.rfa. as shown. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog.

2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ 3D Views. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. click Training Files. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

or width. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. select 25mm. 4 In the floor plan view. width. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. click Check None. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. height. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. width. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . or height. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. 7 On the Options Bar. Changing the diameter. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. for Diameter. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). 6 In the Filter dialog. 8 Click Modify. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. and click OK.

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 17 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Tags are view specific. Clear Leader. . click to place the tag. select the linked architectural file. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. By hiding the linked file. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected.rfa. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. and after each segment highlights. 18 In the 3D view. Press Esc. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 12 If necessary. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog.

for Diameter. The main piping is selected and displays in red. 21 On the Options Bar. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 100mm. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. press Tab. and when the section highlights.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment.

Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. as shown. and then tag the piping as shown. 26 Using the same method. select 40mm. for Diameter. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. and maximize the floor plan. 24 In the drawing area. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 Close the 3D view.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. The pipe diameter is modified. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. In this exercise.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. In this tutorial. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. For additional practice. you created a wet fire protection system.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. You added tags to pipes. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.

304 .

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details. add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and click OK.rvt. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. matchlines. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. 2 In the Project Browser. 307 . and view references. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click Copy of Level 1. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Rename. dependent views. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click Properties. and apply a view template. If the view included detail graphics. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

and then press Esc. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. create dependent views for areas B and C. and click OK. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and click OK.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and click Rename. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. views and put them on the sheet. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 9 Click OK. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.rvt. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 6 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and click Apply Default View Template. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. as shown. 4 Using the same method. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 10 In the drawing area. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. click Training Files. 7 Close the file without saving. more focused. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.

14 Click Finish Matchline. and click OK. select black. In the Color dialog. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. 19 In the drawing area. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select Double Dash . click the current value. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Click OK. and then press Esc. For Line Pattern. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 13 Press Esc twice. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. For Line Weight. select 11. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline.

on the Options Bar. 21 Using the same method. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. as shown. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.20 Select the upper view reference and. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 25 Using the same method. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. for Target view. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference.

Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 27 Using the same method. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. For Default View Template. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in. enter Plumbing Isometric . and zoom to each of the view references. for View Name. 4 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . select Plumbing Isometric. and select the section box. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. click Training Files. right-click 3D Plumbing.Domestic Water. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

Click Apply. 10 Right-click.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For Pattern. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. select 3. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. Click OK. for View Classification. For Sub-Discipline. The section crop lines no longer display. 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. and then click OK. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click Apply Default View Template. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Documentation.Domestic Water. select Dash. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. select Plumbing. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and click to select it.

change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. press Tab 3 times. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click to select it.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 13 Using the same method.

14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. 15 Right-click. and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.

17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.5mm Arial. and in the view properties.16 Press Esc. specify Plumbing . create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. and in the Type Selector.Isometric. select 1. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. and for Default View Template. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . verify that Common is selected. On the View Control Bar. 19 Using methods learned previously. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. click on the Format value. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 .Sanitary Waste. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. For Slope.

27 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.rvt. and then place the callout view on a sheet. select To the nearest 10. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m.■ In the Format dialog. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. for Rounding. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 22 Click OK twice. 26 Press Esc twice. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When the view is associated with a sheet. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.

7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Creating Callout Views | 317 . beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. select 1 : 50. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. for Scale. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 5 On the Options Bar.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.

and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. double-click M601 . for Line Weight. under Sheets (all). Expand the Callout Boundary category and. and select the viewport.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. using the same method. select 5. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. drag it to the sheet. 13 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view.

right-click the callout view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Apply Default View Template. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. For Title on Sheet. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. enter WSHP PART PLAN. Creating Callout Views | 319 . The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. For Default View Template.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Project Browser. for View Name. Click OK.

21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.

and click Rename. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Creating Callout Views | 321 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 26 In the Rename View dialog. 25 In the Project Browser. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. right-click the detail view. under Names.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click Apply View Template.

322 .

as shown. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. and annotation to create a legend. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. work with model-based components.rvt. linetypes. click Training Files. duct tags. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. symbols. Creating Annotations In this exercise. 323 .Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.

6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. and select 1. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 9 Press Esc twice. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 8 With the text still selected.

select a supply diffuser. and then click Right Straight. 15 On the Options Bar. a segment of round duct. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Creating Annotations | 325 . Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. as shown. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a return diffuser.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. verify that Leader is cleared. 16 In the drawing area. and a segment of rectangular duct.

move diffuser tags off the ductwork. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. clear Leader. under Category. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. click Load. for Ducts. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. and click Open. If necessary. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 22 In the Tags dialog. and click OK. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct.17 Click Modify. 20 In the Tags dialog. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 25 In the drawing area.rfa. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 24 On the Options Bar. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.

26 On the Options Bar. 31 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 327 . select Horizontal. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 32 In the drawing area. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Leader. and then press Esc. and Attached End.

as shown. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. select Free End. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Leader. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 36 Press Esc twice.33 On the Options Bar. 34 In the drawing area.

lay out. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. and all elements of that type are affected. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. indicating that it’s the active view.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. for Leader Arrowhead. click Training Files. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 40 Using the method learned previously. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Creating Dimensions | 329 . you use temporary dimensions to locate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. select the last tag placed. 37 In the drawing area. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. and click OK. and lock lighting fixtures. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. not simply an instance property. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. In the left pane of the Open dialog. That’s because you changed a type property.rvt. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 14 Using the same method. 13 Press Esc.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 12 Click EQ. and then select the interior face of the wall. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. On the Options Bar. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. select the dimension line.

21 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 2430. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because the dimensions are locked. click the 3 interior locks on the line. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. and offset them from the wall. annotation symbols. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 17 Press Esc. and press Enter. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line.rvt. Creating a Legend | 331 . 19 Select the dimension value (3376. click Training Files. linework. 20 Using the same methods. and notes.9).

Click OK. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .200 Neck. For Scale. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 5 Click in the drawing area. enter Diffuser Legend. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. ■ 9 In the drawing area.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. For View. and select 1. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select 1 : 50. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . click below the title to place the diffuser.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Floor Plan. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 10 Using the same method.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.

Creating a Legend | 333 . 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.11 Press Esc. and select 1.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.

19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. The selected detail lines are now thin. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 24 Select the component’s break line. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and then press Esc. 21 Press Esc. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.DROP and its text note. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 26 Press Esc. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .

MECHANICAL LEGEND. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 35 Change the text on the right to N. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 34 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify. Creating a Legend | 335 . Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.30 Select Spot Elevation . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. enter E.

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select Title w Line .No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 40 Press Esc.

A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m.rvt. 337 . A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. click Training Files. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A detail callout that references another view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. A drafting view using detail components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . and text. detail groups.113 East elevation view. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.Detailing 15 In this lesson.

5 In the drawing area. and click to place it. place Power Riser . select each of the 2 panelboards.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . clear Leader. and then modify and align the views. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. Next. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .113 East on the sheet.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 4 On the Options Bar. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Using the same method.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 7 Drag the Power Riser .

Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. for Title on Sheet. right-click. and click Deactivate View. and click Activate View. giving the appearance of a single view. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. under Identity Data. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click OK. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 13 Right-click. select the 113 North view.9 Press Esc. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

as shown.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. In the next exercise. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click. and click Activate View. 19 Select the Level 1 line. you add wiring to the diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. and select Title w Line . 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 22 Press Esc. select the 113 East elevation view. 21 Using the drag control.

you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. select 6. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 9 Beginning at the transformer. 8 On the Options Bar.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. In the Line Styles dialog. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Chain is selected. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .rvt. as shown. In the New Subcategory dialog. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. As you draw. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. for Line Weight. for Name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Modify Subcategories. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser .113 North view. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. click New.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. and click OK. enter Electrical Power. expand Lines. 2 Close the Project Browser. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. notice that there are no snaps active.

enter 3mm. as shown.10 Press Esc. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 13 On the Options Bar. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. 11 Using the same method.

so that the result is as shown. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.

23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. select Multiple. 29 Click Modify. 33 On the Options Bar. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. and select 1. 28 Click above the cap. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 31 While pressing Ctrl. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.

36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

39 Move the cursor to the right. click on the length dimension value. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. change the length of the bottom line to 3. 40 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 .Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. and press Enter. enter 12. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. and press Enter.0. you can ensure that they stay together. and then press Esc. Press Esc. for Offset. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 3. You enter exact values for each line length. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. Using the same method. enter 7.

TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click OK. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. select all 3 lines. 47 In the drawing area. 46 In the Project Browser. 50 With the group selected. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. expand Groups ➤ Detail.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 52 Select the detail group. for Name. 54 Select the group. while pressing Ctrl. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. enter Ground. 51 Using the method learned previously. and then press Esc. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. In later exercises. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and will place it on sheet E01. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components.

5 Right-click the copy. and double click Typical Make Up Air. select 3D Views. click Training Files. 8 On the ViewCube. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. click Home. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and click Rename. and click Apply View Template. 3 Select the section box. Walkthroughs. and then click the corner where the Top. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and then press Esc. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.rvt. and Left sides converge. 2 Zoom in to view the section. Back. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. for Name. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Move the cursor down and to the left.■ ■ Under Names. Typical. and click to specify the second leader point. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. select 3D HVAC Iso. Click OK. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Using the same method. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1.

19 Complete the text labels. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. under Extents. To rotate and reposition a text label. select Crop Region Visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. as shown. as shown. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail.18 Press Esc. and under Extents. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 23 Click on the crop region. and then click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

and under Extents. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. 33 Right-click the view. Place a detail component. scroll down. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 29 Right click the view.rvt. Use detail lines to create a detail group. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. and click Activate View.25 Click OK. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Instance Properties. 30 On the View Control Bar. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. clear Crop Region Visible. click Training Files. select Crop View and Section Box.

11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 3 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Element panel. 9 Zoom in to the component. Click OK. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. click the point at the top of the drain. select 1 : 5. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Click OK. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. select Plumbing. for Sub-Discipline. For Scale. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. select Documentation. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. right-click the view name. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. as the rectangle start point.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click Properties. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. For View Classification. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. as shown. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 13 In the drawing area. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

20 Select 1. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. and then press Esc. for Type.I. select C.P. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 22 Click Modify. 18 With the filled region still selected. Concrete. and click OK. 21 In the drawing area.

select the filled region. 34 Press Esc. (Line). 31 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 28 Click Modify. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then click to select them. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. select Multiple.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary.

Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the side of the slab above the line.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 40 Click Finish Region. and then press Esc. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab.

Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. for Name. and click OK. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down.D. 45 Using the method learned previously. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. select the Flashing Membrane group. 52 In the Create Group dialog. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. as shown. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. (Rectangle). and then click to select them. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. enter Flashing Membrane_F. press Tab to highlight the chain. 49 Click Modify. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. draw wide detail lines as shown. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. press Spacebar twice. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 55 Press Esc. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. as shown. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 61 Using the same method.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. select Leader and Free End. 67 On the Options Bar. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User.62 Press Esc twice. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 64 Press Esc twice.

80 Press Esc twice. 81 Select the text note. 76 To select the leader start point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. select the keynote and drag the text to the right.70 In the Keynotes dialog. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. select 15000 (Division 15 . Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. and click to specify the text insertion point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and click to specify the second leader point. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 78 Move the cursor to the left. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . and then click OK. 71 Click Modify. 72 If necessary.

Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.

85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. select the view title. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. open P103 . and then press Esc twice. and click to place it. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 90 Press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 88 In the drawing area.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful